Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKG220

USER GUIDE

KG220

Please read this manual carefully before operating your

mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.

KG220

P/N : MMBB

KG220

KG220_UAE_Cover 2006.5.3 1:52 PM Page 1

Summary of content (205 pages)

PAGE 1
KG220_UAE_Cover 2006.5.3 1:52 PM Page 1 KG 220 P/N : MMBB KG 220 KG 220 USER GUIDE Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference.
PAGE 2
‫‪ KG220‬دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.
PAGE 3
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وإﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫رﻣﻮز اﻟﻮﺻﻮل‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎ ت‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫رد _ﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎ ت‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫أﻟﻌﺎب وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﺻ
PAGE 5
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
PAGE 6
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ KG220‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷداء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم وﺻﻐﺮ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪث ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫دﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷداء وﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ إﻟﺤﺎق‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﺳﻮء اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎك اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﻮر‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮة أو ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪك ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( وﻣﻌﺪل‬ ‫اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ KG220‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺮوط اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 8
‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻸدﺧﻨﺔ أو اﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮط‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎن أو ﺗﺬاﻛﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻼت‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻤﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄداة ﺣﺎدة‪ ،‬وإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮاﺋﻞ أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ إﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس وﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻻذن ﺑﺤﺬر‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ادﺧﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼت ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ وﻻ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﻮن ﺑﺪون ﺿﺮورة‬ ‫◄ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺮص‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ اﻷﻟﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪ .‬اﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺪود‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع أي ﻟﻮاﺋﺢ أو ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎح ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أﺑﺪاً أن ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد‪ .‬وﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﻮد أو اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ اﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫◄ ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﺎب اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ وﺟﻮد أﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫زر ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺤﺎت ﻟﺤﺰام اﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪/‬اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫أﻃﺮاف ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫‪ .7‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ إﻟﻰ _ﺧﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة واﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹدﺧﺎل أرﻗﺎم أو ﺣﺮوف أو ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .13‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺤﺬف ﺣﺮف ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ً‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺪة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح إﻟﻰ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺣﺮف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ ”‪.“+‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎل ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG220‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺻﻮل اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎل ﺻﻔﺤﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.
PAGE 15
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ وأن اﺗﺠﺎ‪ x‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ واﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎ‪ x‬اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ واﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﺗﺠﺎ‪ x‬اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪ .1‬ادﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ )اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬واﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ادﻓﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﺗﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻞ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫◄ إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎرج ﺑﻠﺪك‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺤﻮل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ اﻧﺰع ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﺤﺎدة ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎن اﻟﺤﻴﻮاﻧﺎت واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ أن ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 18
‫رﻣﻮز اﻟﻮﺻﻮل )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام(‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪) PIN‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬أرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ رﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ رﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬رﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬وﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪاد ﻃﻠﺐ إدﺧﺎل‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻘﻮم ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬وﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫إﻋﺪاد ﻃﻠﺐ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة دون اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 19
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ دوﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎدﺋﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮم ﻋﻼﻣﺔ “‪ ”+‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮد اﻟﺪﺧﻮل اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻛﻮد اﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻛﻮد اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻛﻮد اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫◄ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ )‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل )‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈن اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻧﻴﻦ وﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻮاﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )أو اﺳﻤﻪ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻠﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎر وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮد‪ .‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) 55‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(.(2.3.
PAGE 21
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮف ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮف واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس داﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪاً ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )أ ب ج(‪ .‬وﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‪.
PAGE 22
‫◄ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮب ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ إذا ﻇﻠﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎم‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة‬ ‫أو ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم وﺿﻊ ا ب ت )اﻟﺤﺮوف(‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ واﺛﻖ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫◄ إذا ﻓﻘﺪت اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً وﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ا ب ت‪.
PAGE 23
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫أﺣﺮف‬ ‫؛‪. 1 ! ، :‬‬ ‫ب ت ة ث‪2‬‬ ‫اأإىؤئء‪3‬‬ ‫سشصض‪4‬‬ ‫دذرز‪5‬‬ ‫¸‬ ‫جحخ‪6‬‬ ‫نوى‪7‬‬ ‫فقكلم‪8‬‬ ‫طظعغ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬ ‫◄ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )رﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل(‪.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺮاد إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫وذﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﺪوﻳﺎً إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎدل أو ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة ﻋﻨﺪ رﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎً أن ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاءك ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺼﺪر ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‪ ،‬وﺗﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮف‬ ‫ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﺎﺳﻢ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ ،‬وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬أﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻫﻮ ﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮد أن ﺗﺒﺪأ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫اﻷﻃﺮاف‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ أﻧﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻃﺮاف‪.‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ إﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاﺋﻚ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻵن‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ أدوار ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺴﻴﺎق اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًة ﻓﻮق ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إﻟﻰ اﻟﺪور اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫(‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ وادوات‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﻋﺎم‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎل‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.1‬اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 5.2‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪ 6.1‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6.2‬ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 6.3‬اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻰ‬ ‫‪ 7.2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 7.
PAGE 28
‫‪ 1.5‬رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫‪ 1.7‬أﻟﻌﺎب وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫‪ 2.7‬ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.9‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.5‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬ ‫‪ 3.7‬ﺻﻮر‬ ‫‪ 3.9‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 4.5‬ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫‪ 4.7‬اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪ 4.9‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.5‬ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ .8‬اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ 5.9‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6.9‬إﻋﺪادات‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 7.5‬ﻧﻤﺎذج‬ ‫‪ 2.8‬اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ 7.9‬إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8.5‬اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ذﻫﺎب إﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8.9‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 29
‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻮال وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻷﺣﺪاث واﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎت وﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﺳﺘﺔ أوﺿﺎع ﻣﻌﺪة ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ وﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﺎم و ﻋﺎل و ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت راس‬ ‫وﺳﻴﺎرة واﻫﺘﺰاز وﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ اﻷوﺿﺎع اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ وﺣﺪد اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎر‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎص‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.X.1‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎص‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ أي اﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ x‬ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.X.1‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع اﻫﺘﺰاز ﻓﻘﻂ و ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس و اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻛﺘﺐ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ x‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ" أو‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ واﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬داﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ واﻻﺳﻢ )إن وﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮض أوﻗﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض _ﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة أو اﻟﻮاردة أو اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.2‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ أو‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ أو اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ واﺣﺪ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.2‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.6.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ رؤﻳﺔ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫◄ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ رؤﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬ ‫‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.7.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة وﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻟﻲ اﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺣﺪات ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.7.
PAGE 34
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ وادوات‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮك اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ‪ 5‬أوﻗﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وأدﺧﻞ وﻗﺖ إﻃﻼق اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪x‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺘﻜﺮار‪ :‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة واﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ – اﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ واﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫– اﻟﺴﺒﺖ وﻛﻞ ﻳﻮم‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ أول رﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ وادوات‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ وادوات‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ .4‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﻳﺴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬أدﺧﻞ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫رد ﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ أي ﺧﻄﺄ أو ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7.3‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.
PAGE 36
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪة اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ إﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(8.8.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺮد ﺑﺎﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ رﻧﺔ‬ ‫واﺣﺪة‪ ٣ ،‬رﻧﺎت أو ‪ ۵‬رﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫◄ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ أن ﻳﻘﺪم ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ وﺳﻮق اﻷﺳﻬﻢ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وأﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 500‬رﻗﻢ واﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪..‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﻛﺘﺐ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﺜﻮر ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺑﺤﺚ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إدﺧﺎل دﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮًا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪..‬‬ ‫وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪد اﺳﻤًﺎ ﻷي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻷﺳﺮة‪،‬‬ ‫اﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء‪ ،‬اﻟﺰﻣﻼء‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ ،،1‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ ،،2‬وأﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.[1‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدارﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء؛ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء؛ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫واﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻤﺮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء؛ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫واﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6.1.4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻓﻲ ‪ SIM‬أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬ‪x‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ رﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(7.1.
PAGE 40
‫◄ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ أدﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﺧﻼل ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺳﺘﻴﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺔ ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻴﻼدي او اﻟﻬﺠﺮي او اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺠﺪول أو اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﻟﻠﻴﻮم اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ أو ﺣﺬف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺤﺬف ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت اﻟﺠﺪول‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻹﺧﻄﺎر ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة( و ‪) MMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة( واﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎت وﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا أردت ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﻴﺴﻴﺮ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫◄ إﻧﻬﺎء‪ :‬إذا ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ إﻧﻬﺎء أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ واﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ‪g‬ﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺬي ‪g‬ﺪﻋﻢ اﻻﺻﺪار اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻣﻦ ‪ EMS‬إرﺳﺎل ﺻﻮر‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ وأﺻﻮات وأﻧﻤﺎط ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬إﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ‪g‬ﺴﺘﻠﻢ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫أو اﻷﺻﻮات أو اﻷﻧﻤﺎط اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ إذا ﻟﻢ ‪g‬ﻜﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻪ ‪g‬ﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.1.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ وﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة واﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ )‪.(T9Abc/T9abc/T9ABC‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎت ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪.T9‬‬ ‫◄ إﻧﻬﺎء‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺮاءة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫◄ إذا اﺧﺘﺮت ﺻﻮرة )ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ‪ (15K‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة إﻟﻰ ﻃﺮف _ﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤًﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫وأﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺗﻤﺎم اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﻟﺮد‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ رد ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎودة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺮاﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ MMS‬ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬إﻟﻐﺎء إرﺳﺎل ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 45
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬وﻗﺖ وﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫اﻹرﺳﺎل‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﺎرﻳﺔ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫◄ إرﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫◄ إﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 46
‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﻲ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم ‪ .GSM‬وﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ اﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬ ‫وﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور وﺳﻴﺎرات اﻷﺟﺮة واﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎت وأﺳﻌﺎر اﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت رﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪد‪ ،‬ﻟﺬا‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪ .
PAGE 47
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬‫اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪.SMS‬‬ ‫ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹرﺳﺎل‬‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪.MMS‬‬ ‫◄ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪك ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪ .‬أﻛﺘﺐ اﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ورﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬف رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج‪.
PAGE 48
‫◄ اﻷﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬وﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬وﻗﺼﻮى‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪة اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫)ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.8.5‬‬ ‫◄ اﻻﺳﺘﻼم‬ ‫ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬إذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ‪ :‬إذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ‬‫أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ‬‫أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬ ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬‫إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .
PAGE 50
‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ واﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺛﻢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬أو ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ وﺣﺪة اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ وﺣﺪة اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‪ ،‬وﻳﻤﻜﻦ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﺳﺘﺼﻮر‪.x‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪) :‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.6‬‬ ‫(‪VGA، 320 × 480 × 640 :‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬اﻟﻮﺿﻮح‪) :‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪240 QVGA، 160 × 120 QQVGA. 48 × 48‬‬ ‫)دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ ‪ /‬أﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 51
‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮر ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮاﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﺼﻮرة؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ /‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪون ﻋﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻼ‪.x‬‬ ‫“ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺼﻮرة؛ رﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‬ ‫‪.‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺼﻮرة؛ رﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‬ ‫“ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪.
PAGE 52
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻷﻟﻌﺎب ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬وﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ اﻷﻟﻌﺎب ﻋﻦ اﻷﻟﻌﺎب اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻠﻌﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ أﻟﻌﺎب ﺟﺎﻓﺎ؛ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ”‪“OK‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.7‬‬ ‫◄ اﻷﻟﻌﺎب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إدارة ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻠﻌﺐ أو ﺣﺬف اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﺔ‪ ،‬أو‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات‪.
PAGE 53
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮر‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‪ ،‬وﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬وﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.7‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.
PAGE 54
‫اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ x‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰود‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔاﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪة‬ ‫إﺷﺎرات ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪة ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ أن ﺗﻠﻚ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 55
‫اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫وﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻛﻞ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ أو رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(ISDN‬‬ ‫◄ إﻋﺪادات‪ :‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ إﻋﺪادات ‪ WAP‬وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫زﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‪ :‬إﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮن ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل أو ﻧﻘﻞ أي ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان )‪(URL‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪء‪ .
PAGE 56
‫◄ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫◄ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎوﻟﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ أم ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ أم ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮظ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺎر‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﺎق اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﺨﺰن ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 57
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ وﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﺑﺦ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪى اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.3.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻮاردة إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ _ﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺷﺮوط‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل إﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫]إرﺳﺎل[ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًدا إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.3.9‬‬ ‫◄ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻃﺮف _ﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ 1‬أو ﺧﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًدا إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.
PAGE 60
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.4.9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاء أو ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا إﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.4.9‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ إﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ أو ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺎدة‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5.4.
PAGE 62
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.1.5.9‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻄﺎق‬ ‫ﻳﺪوي‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.5.9‬‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.2.5.9‬‬ ‫ًَ‬ ‫وﻓﻘﺎ وﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.EGSM/DCS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪوي‬ ‫)اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.2.5.9‬‬ ‫ًَ‬ ‫وﻓﻘﺎ وﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.EGSM/PCS‬‬ ‫إﻋﺪادات ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫إذا اﺧﺘﺮت ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ GPRS‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ WAP‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﻬﺎء اﺗﺼﺎل ‪.
PAGE 63
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻟﺠﻮاﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أي ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻼه ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ دون إﻋﻼن‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬ‪ x‬اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ أو اﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺣﺮر اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ أذن وﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪KG220 :‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪PCS 1900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 900 :‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 55+ :‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫أدﻧﻰ ‪ 10- :‬درﺟﺎت ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪63‬‬
PAGE 65
PAGE 66
‫‪KG220‬‬ ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮا ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﺣﻔﻆ اﻳﻦ‬ ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ* دﻗﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮارد اﻳﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ* ﮔﻮﺷ‪/‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار* و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن دادن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣ‪Q‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ* رو* ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘ
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ* ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* درﻳﺎﻓﺘ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪ ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* اﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ* ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎر*‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮب‬ ‫زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ‪/‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﺎرت‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ورود*‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟ‪/‬‬ ‫‪44
PAGE 69
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋ‪Q‬ﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﻣﻨﻴﺘ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺠﺪد‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪6
PAGE 70
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ از ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪل‬ ‫ال‪ .‬ﺟ‪ KG220 /‬ﺑﺎ ‪J‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژ* ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻃﺮاﺣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻬﻤ‪ /‬در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮ ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪G‬ﺎر‪G‬ﺮد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ و‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮ* از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ از اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ اﺻﻼﺣ‪/‬‬ ‫‪G‬ﻪ در اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ذ‪G‬ﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ از ﺑﻴﻦ رﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ‪ /‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﮔﺮدد‪.
PAGE 71
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻨ‪ /‬و اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪم رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك و ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰ )‪ (ICNIRP‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪ ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ 2‬وات ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮم ﺑﺮا* د ) ‪ ( 10‬ﮔﺮم‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪن اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮارﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻧﺮژ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ رادﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰان ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺮا* اﻳﻦ ﻣﺪل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮا* اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‬ ‫در ﻛﻨﺎر ﮔﻮش ‪ 0.
PAGE 72
‫◄‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در اﺛﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎ ﻟﻔﺎف ﻳﺎ‬ ‫روﻛﺶ وﻳﻨﻴﻠ‪J /‬ﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎرﺟ‪ /‬ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺸﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از اﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮا* ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬را در ﻣﻌﺮض دود ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬را در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜ‪ /‬ﻛﺎرت ﻫﺎ* اﻋﺘﺒﺎر* ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ*‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ* ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴ‪ /‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 73
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳ‪ /‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻨ‪ /‬و اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻳﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻨ‪Q‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺧﻮد ‪J‬ﮔﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ‪G /‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘ‪ /‬ﮔﻮش ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﭘﻴﺪا ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ درﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪا در ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ‪G /‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ از ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻋﺒﻮر ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫◄ ﻻزم ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺎرژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ‪G‬ﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف دﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ* ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﻫﻴﭻ اﺛﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ا* وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ‪G‬ﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠ‪Q‬ﺮد ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬارد‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* و ﺷﺎرژرﻫﺎ* ال ﺟ‪ /‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎرژرﻫﺎ* الﺟ‪ /‬ﺑﺮا* اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﻃﺮاﺣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪ اﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﺗﺼﺎلﻫﺎ* ﻓﻠﺰ* ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* را ﺑﺎز ﻧ‪Q‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎ* ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻧ‪Q‬ﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪J‬ن را ﻋﻮض‬ ‫‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣ‪/‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 75
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ را ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎى ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎ ﻦ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى‬ ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪J‬ﻣﺎد ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر وﻗﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺪﻓﻰ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺪاى ‪J‬ﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫در ﻃﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺪاى ﮔﻮﺷﻰ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎى ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬ ‫◄ ‪J‬ﻟﻮدﮔﻰ روى ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺬارد‪.
PAGE 76
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ* ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ در زﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 77
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﺑﺎز‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ دورﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن‪/‬روﺷﻦ و‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫‪ .١٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫‪ .١۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎى ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫ﺧﺎص‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮا* ﻣﻨﻮ* ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ارﺳﺎل‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎر ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎى ورودى‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ‪ /‬روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﻳﺎ رد‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎس و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪J‬ﻣﺎد ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎر از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‪/‬روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ را ﭘﺎك‬ ‫ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ورودى‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ از‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻠﻴﺪ دورﺑﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮا* اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از وﻳﮋﮔ‪ /‬دورﺑﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى‪KG220‬‬ ‫وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى ‪KG220‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن دادن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ داد ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن داد ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ رو ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ زﻧﮓ ﻟﺮزﺷ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ در ﺟﺮﻳﺎن اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت را در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ‪J‬ن ﺟﺎى دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ‪J‬ن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪G‬ﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﺎرت درﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻃﻼﻳﻰ‬ ‫رﻧﮓ روى ﻛﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت‪J ،‬ن را ﺑﻪ ‪J‬راﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر داد و در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮ ‪J‬زادﺳﺎزى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﻓﺸﺎر داد و درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮف اﻧﺘﻬﺎى ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬و درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ* را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ‪G‬ﺎر‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺎر‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺷﺎرژ ﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اى وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﻮح ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ‪J‬ن ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى )ﺳﻄﻮح ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻼﻳ‪ (/‬در ﺟﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى در‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ردﻳﻒ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ در ﺟﺎى‬ ‫ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* اﺗﺼﺎل ‪J‬داﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ* را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮد ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻼش ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺷﻤﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻴﺶ‬ ‫‪J‬داﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ* را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎ* ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در ﺟﺎ* ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 82
‫◄ اﮔﺮ از ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ* در ﺧﺎرج از ﻛﺸﻮر ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬از‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮا* ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ* ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق و ﺷﺎرژر را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ‪ /‬و ‪J‬ﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز* ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮ* ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬زﻣﺎﻧﻴ‪Q‬ﻪ ﺷﺎرژ ‪G‬ﺮدن ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ*‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* رو* ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ”ﭘﺮ“ رو* ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﮔﺮدد‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪ /‬اﻓﺮاد ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز از ﻛﺪﻫﺎ* دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪/‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪﻫﺎ* دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪)/‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ‪ PUK‬و ‪(PUK2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ ۵٫۴٫٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮد و ‪J‬ن را ﺑﻪ ‪J‬داﭘﺘﻮر ﺑﺮﻗ‪/‬‬ ‫و ﻳﺎ ‪J‬داﭘﺘﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮ* ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪ ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫را ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻛﺪ ‪) PUK‬ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺪ ‪ (PIN‬ﺑﺮا* ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺎﻧ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﺷﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪ Call barring‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮر ﻧﻴﺎز دارﻳﺪ‪ .‬زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮا* اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد)‪(Call barring‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر را از ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ‪/‬‬ ‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا* اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۶‬رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺮد و ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻠ‪ /‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮدد‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻛﺪﻫﺎ*‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪ /‬ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ‪ /‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻬﺎ*‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎر ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را‬ ‫وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا* اﺻﻼح ﺷﻤﺎر ‪٬‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ )‬ ‫‪.٣‬دﻛﻤﻪ ارﺳﺎل )‬ ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎر ﭘﺎك ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.
PAGE 86
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪا* ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ را در ﻃﻮل ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻢ و‬ ‫زﻳﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺎر* اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪( ) .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* زﻳﺎد ﻛﺮدن‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳ‪ /‬و ﺑﺮا* ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﺪا* ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫از دﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬ ‫◄ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪J‬ﻣﺎد ﺑ‪Q‬ﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﮔﻮﺷ‪ ٬/‬ﻓﺸﺎر د‪G‬ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ* ﻛﻨﺎر*‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ* ﺻﺪا* ﺗﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫زﻣﺎن درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ زﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ و ﻓﻼش ﺗﻠﻔﻦ رو*‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬اﻟﻔﺒﺎ و اﻋﺪاد را وارد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﻣﺜﺎل ذﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺎﻣ‪ /‬در دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪٬‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ذﺧﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎم‪ ،‬اﻳﺠﺎد‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﺷﺨﺼ‪./‬‬ ‫روﺷﻬﺎ* ورود ﻣﺘﻦ زﻳﺮ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪ /‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪T٩‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ‪ /‬ﺣﺮوف ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪J ٬‬ن ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮد‪T٩ .
PAGE 88
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘ‪ /‬ﭘﺲ از ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪن‪ ٬‬ﻟﻐﺖ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪٬‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ* دﻳﮕﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺖ رﺟﻮع ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪Good‬‬ ‫د‪G‬ﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ*‬ ‫را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪Home‬‬ ‫)دﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﺪار‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ‪ /‬وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬‫‪J‬ن را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ زﺑﺎن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )‪ (Option‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪T٩‬‬ ‫‪ Languages‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬زﺑﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻋﺪاد ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ را ﻗﺎدر ﻣﻴﺴﺎزد در‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‪ /‬ﺧﻮد ﻋﺪد وارد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮا* ﻣﺜﺎل ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎر ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1:@‘!?-,.
PAGE 90
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧ‪ /‬را در ﻃﻮل ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﻬﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎزد‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑ‪ /‬ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت در ﻃﻮل ﺗﻤﺎس دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داد ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳ‪ /‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔ‪ /‬دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﺎدر اﺳﺖ درﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﺻﺤﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ را از درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس دﻳﮕﺮ* ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺳﺎزد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪا* ﺑﻮق ﺷﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد و رو* ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﺪن ﺷﺨﺺ دوم ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ و ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑ‪ /‬ﺻﺪا‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﻃﻮل ﻳ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﻴ‪Q‬ﺮوﻓﻦ را ﺑ‪ /‬ﺻﺪا ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺪا دار ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪا* ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬را ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗ‪G /‬ﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬را ﺑ‪ /‬ﺻﺪا ‪G‬ﺮد ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‬ ‫ﻧﻤ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺻﺪا* ﺷﻤﺎ را ﺑﺸﻨﻮد در ﺣﺎﻟﻴ‪Q‬ﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺪا* او را‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﺠﺎد ‪ DTMF‬در ﻃﻮل ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر‪ ٬‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ‪ DTMF‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﺑﺮا* اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﺟﺎر* دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﻓﺸﺎر داد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫ ‪/‬اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﮔﺮوﻫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن در ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ رو* اﺳﺎﻣ‪ /‬اﻓﺮاد* ﻛﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺰ دﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎ* ﺟﻬﺘﺪار ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺨﺼﻮص در ﻃﻮل ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ‪ /‬ﻛﻪ اﻛﻨﻮن ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‪ .
PAGE 93
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اى از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ را در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‬ ‫در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ و از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ دو‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎى‬ ‫(و)‬ ‫)‬ ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻣﻰ دﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺧﺎص را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١.١‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪ ‬ ‫‪ ١.٣‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮب‬ ‫‪ ١.٥‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢.١‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ ٢.٣‬زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢.٥‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ورود*‬ ‫‪ ٣.١‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٣.٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ ٣.٥‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٤.١‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٤.٣‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب‬ ‫‪ ٤.٥‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٥.١‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٥.٣‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٥.٥‬ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٦.١‬داﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٦.٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٦.٥‬ﭘﻴﺎم اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٧.٣‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٧.٥‬اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٨.٣‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٨.٥‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ ١.
PAGE 95
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪ .٨‬اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ ١.٧‬ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١.٨‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ١.٩‬ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫‪ ٢.٧‬ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪ ٢.٨‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٣.٧‬ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٣.٨‬رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫‪ ٣.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪ ٤.٧‬ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٤.٨‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ ٤.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﻣﻨﻴﺘ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ٥.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٦.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ ٧.٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺠﺪد‬ ‫‪ ٨.
PAGE 96
‫در ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ‪J‬ﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ* ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺮا* روﻳﺪادﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮو ﻫﺎ* ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪ ‪ ,‬ﺑﺪون‬ ‫ﺻﺪا‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪ , /‬ﺻﺪا* ﺑﻠﻨﺪ و ﮔﻮﺷ‪ ./‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ را‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮان اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻ‪ /‬ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.X.١‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎرﺷ ﺮدن ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣.X.١‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ را ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ و ﻧﺎم دﻟﺨﻮا را ﺑﺮا* ‪J‬ن‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﻧﺎم ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ* ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮزش‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬و اﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ )و ﺻﺎﻣﺖ( را ﻧﻤ‪ /‬ﺗﻮان‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ داد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮا* ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ در ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻪ و ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺎم را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ را وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ )‪ (CLI‬را در‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮان ﺳﻮاﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑ‪ /‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬درﻳﺎﻓﺘ‪ /‬را ﺑﺮرﺳ‪ /‬ﻛﺮد ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎر و ﻧﺎم )در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮا ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.٢‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎﺳﺦ داد ﻧﺸﺪ ‬ ‫اﺧﻴﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 99
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٥.٢‬‬ ‫از اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮا* ﭘﺎ‪ Ç‬ﻧﻤﻮدن ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ* ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ* درﻳﺎﻓﺘ‪ ،/‬ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ* ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ )ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ( ‪G‬ﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ را‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﭘﺎ‪ Ç‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﺪت ﻣ‪.‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦.٢‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪a‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ :‬ﻣﺪت ‪J‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪت ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ و ورود* از‬ ‫زﻣﺎن ‪J‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ درﻳﺎﻓﺘ ‪ :‬ﻣﺪت ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ورود*‪.
PAGE 100
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮد ﺎر‪ :‬اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎز ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ* ‪J‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎن را ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮد ﺑﺨﻮد ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ‬ ‫روﺷﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‪J ،‬ﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ را ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣ‪Q‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧.٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪار داد ﻫﺎى اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ‪ GPRS‬از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪ GPRS‬ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼو ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪J‬ﻧﻼﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت ﻣ‪.‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.٧.
PAGE 101
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮب‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮارد ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اراﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘ‪ /‬ﺑﺮا* ﺧﻮد ﻣﻨﻮ* ﺷﺨﺼ‪ /‬اﻳﺠﺎد‬ ‫ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸ‪ /‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد دﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢.٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻧﻮع زﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮا* ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ روﺷﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﻮد و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد‬ ‫را ﺑﺮا* زﻧﮓ زدن وارد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 102
‫‪ .۴‬ﻧﻮع واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ* ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ و راﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎز ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ را ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ* ﻋﺪد*‪ ،‬اﻋﺪاد را وارد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮد‪G‬ﺎر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﺴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ،‬اﻋﺪاد اﻋﺸﺎر* را ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ وارد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦.
PAGE 103
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮدن‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﺎرﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻨﻴﺪن ﺻﺪا راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ :‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎز ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪ ﮔﻮش دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم دﻟﺨﻮا ﺧﻮد را‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ‪ ۵١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ و از ‪J‬ن در ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﮕﻴﺮ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﺎرﺑﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺎرت‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎرت(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٩.
PAGE 104
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ‪J‬ﻧﻬﺎ را در‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎرت ﺧﻮد ذﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼو ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎر ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و ﻧﺎم را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧﻴﺮ ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪J‬ﻣﺎد ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫داد ‪ ،‬و ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.١.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬از ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺎﻣﻲ را‬ ‫وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ،‬اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ را وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد(‬ ‫◄‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﻣﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SIM‬ﺎرت‪ :‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎر ا* را وارد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬و ﮔﺮو ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬و ﺷﻤﺎر اي را ‪G‬ﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺷﻤﺎر اﺻﻠ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣.١.٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪا‪G‬ﺜﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮو ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬و در‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮع ﺣﺪا‪G‬ﺜﺮ ‪ ٧‬ﮔﺮو ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﻳﺠﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺮوﻫﻬﺎ* ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪G .
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮا* وﻳﮋﮔ‪ /‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ را از ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪G SIM‬ﺎرت ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻓﺰودن ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣ‪Q‬ﺎن ذﺧﻴﺮ ‬ ‫ﺳﺆال ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﺎرت را در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎ ‪G‬ﭙ‪ /‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋ‪Q‬ﺲ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ اﻣ‪Q‬ﺎ ن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫از ﺳﻴﻢ ﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ‪G‬ﭙ‪G /‬ﺮدن ﻣﺪﺧﻞ از ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪G‬ﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫◄‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٨.١.٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻤﺎر ﮔﻴﺮ )ﺑﻪ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد(‪:‬‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧ‪ /‬ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺴﻬﺎ* اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﺎﻳ‪ /‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﺎ* اﺿﻄﺮار*‪ ،‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﺎ* ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬و ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﺎ* ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر ﮔﻴﺮ* ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬اﺳﺎﻣ‪ /‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ* ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 108
‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎد را از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ*‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻼد*‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺮ* و ﺷﻤﺴ‪ /‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮارد‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎم ﻳﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ* وارد ﺷﺪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ را‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ‪ .‬از ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ* ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮا* ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺎن ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف ﻣﻮارد ﻗﺪﻳﻤ ‪ :‬اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ را ﺑﺮا* ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ*‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪G‬ﺎر* ‪G‬ﻪ ﻗﺒﻸ اﻋﻼم ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬از ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮا*‬ ‫اﻧﺠﺎم اﻳﻦ ‪G‬ﺎر ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣ‪ /‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠ‪Q‬ﺮدﻫﺎ* ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ‪) SMS‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ‪G‬ﻮﺗﺎ (‪) MMS ،‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا*(‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‪ ،/‬و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.٥‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.١.٥‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﻣﺘﻨ‪ /‬را ﺣﺪا‪G‬ﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ و‬ ‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن‬ ‫]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ وارد ﻣﻨﻮ* ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬اﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻛﻮﺗﺎ ‬ ‫را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 110
‫◄ ذﺧﻴﺮ ‪:‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﻛﻮﺗﺎ را در اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺮوﺟ‪ /‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪار*‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪:‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ و ﻧﻮع ﻓﻮﻧﺖ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ رﻧﮓ‪ :‬رﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ را ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ راﺳﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪J‬راﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪G :T٩‬ﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮد را ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ وارد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ زﻣﺎﻧ‪ /‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد ‪G‬ﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫رو* ‪ abc/ABC/١٢٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ زﺑﺎن ‪ :T٩‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورود*‪ T٩‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬اﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻫﺎ* ﻛﻨﻮﻧ‪) /‬ﺟﺎر*( را ﻣ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮا* اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ را‬‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋ ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ و ﻣﺘﻮن ﭘﻴﺎم را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬‫در اﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ و ﻣﺘﻮن ﭘﻴﺎم را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫داد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.
PAGE 112
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﭘﻴﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا* اﻋﻼم ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ داﻧﻠﻮد و ﭘﺮدازش‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺮا* ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﻋﻼم و اﻃﻼع از ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ‪J‬ن ﺑﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ* ‪ (٢.٨.٥‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻜ‪ /‬از ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ را‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎم‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ )ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻳﮕﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ دﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻳﻨ‪.‬ﻪ ﭼﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ‪a‬ن ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ دارا ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ زﻳﺮ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪ را ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪ را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻫﺎ* دﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪ را از ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل ﺣﺬف ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪٥.٥‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻮد )اﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ‪G /‬ﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ‪ /‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ* درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎد‬ ‫‪ ،‬رو* ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﭘﻴ‪Q‬ﺮﺑﻨﺪ*‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮔﻮﺷ‪ ،/‬ﺑﺎ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و از‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪J‬ﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٦.٥‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎى ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎى ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮﻫﺎى ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮا ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧.٥‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ* از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪ ا* در ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* اﻟﮕﻮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ و وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺟﺪﻳﺪ*‬ ‫را اﻳﺠﺎد ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ..‬اﻳﻦ اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮا* ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻨ‪،/‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا*‪G ،‬ﺎرت وﻳﺰﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‪(١.٧.٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎى ﻣﺘﻨﻰ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• دﻳﺮم ﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬از اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮا* ارﺳﺎل‬‫اﻟﮕﻮ* ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ MMS‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 116
‫◄ ﺣﺬف‪ :‬از ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻟﮕﻮ* ﻣﻮﻟﺘ‪ /‬ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﮕﻮ* ﭘﻴﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ‪ /‬را‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬در ﺻﻮرت ارﺳﺎل ﭘﻴﺎم از ﺳﻮ* ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪J‬ن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻟﮕﻮ* ﻣﻮﻟﺘ‪ /‬ﻣﺪﻳﺎ را ﭘﺎ‪ Ç‬ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ارﺳﺎل ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﻣﺘﻨ‪ ،/‬ﺷﻤﺎر ﻣﺮ‪G‬ﺰ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﺷﻤﺎ را ذﺧﻴﺮ ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎر را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ‪ /‬ﺧﻮد‬ ‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت وﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‪(٣.٧.٥‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎرت ﻧﺎم ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺴﺎزﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕ ‪ :‬در ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕ‪ ،/‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ*‬ ‫" روﺷﻦ " داﻧﻠﻮد ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر را ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪ ،‬در ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت‪ ،‬ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺧﺎﻣﻮش داﻧﻠﻮد ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر را‬ ‫در ﺷﺒﻜﻪ روﻣﻴﻨﮓ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رد‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر داﻧﻠﻮد ‪ MMS‬از ﺳﺮور‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪J‬درس‬ ‫‪ URL‬ﺳﺮور ﭘﻴﺎم ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا* را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﻧﻮاع ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺷﺨﺼ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎت‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ* ﺑﺎزرﮔﺎﻧ‪./‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺿﺮور*‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮ ﺰ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‪(٣.٨.
PAGE 118
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ را ﻓﺸﺎر داد و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ* ﻳﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸ‪ /‬دورﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫← ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋ‪Q‬ﺲ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دادن ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ دورﺑﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪J‬ﻣﺎد ﺑﻪ ‪G‬ﺎر‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎز ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬واﺣﺪ دورﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎز ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد و ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ* دﻟﺨﻮا ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋ‪Q‬ﺲ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮار ﻣﻨﻮ*‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟ )‬ ‫‪ .٢‬رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ )‬ ‫‪ .٣‬روﺷﻨﺎﺋ )‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ )‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪a‬ﻟﺒﻮم‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ذﺧﻴﺮ ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴ‪Q‬ﻪ ذﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﻮد‪G‬ﺎر رو* ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮد‪G‬ﺎر و ﺑﺪون ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮار ﻣﻨﻮ* ﺑﺎﻻ ذﺧﻴﺮ ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫“ را در وﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺟﻬﺖ ذﺧﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪” ،‬‬ ‫داد و ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻧﻤ‪ /‬ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ذﺧﻴﺮ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪” ،‬‬ ‫“ را در وﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫داد و ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب”‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ارﺳﺎل ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ داﻣﻨﻪ وﺳﻴﻌ‪/‬‬ ‫از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﺪا ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ داﻧﻠﻮد‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت دارﻧﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺟﺮا* اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺲ از داﻧﻠﻮد ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺑﺎز* ﺟﺎوا‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ذﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎز* در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﺻﻠ‪،/‬‬ ‫( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ »ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ« )‬ ‫ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ ﺷﺦ ﺻ و ﻏﻴﺮ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.١.٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮض ‪:‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ* ﺟﺎوا*‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣.٧‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣ‪ /‬را ﺑﺎ ﻳ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ارﺳﺎل ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٤.٧‬‬ ‫ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣ‪ /‬را ﺑﺎ ﻳ ﺻﺪا ارﺳﺎل ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ و ﺻﺪا را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان‬ ‫‪J‬ﻫﻨﮓ زﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 122
‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮا* اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ‪ /‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﻣﻤ‪Q‬ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺘ‪ /‬را ﺑﺮا* اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر درﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﻣﻨﻮ* اﻣ‪Q‬ﺎﻧﺎت ‪J‬ن را ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢.٨‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ‪ /‬دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪J‬درس ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ وب‬ ‫دﻟﺨﻮا ﺧﻮد را ﺑﺮا* دﺳﺘﺮﺳ‪J /‬ﺳﺎن در دﻓﻌﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ ذﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ دارا* ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎب از ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺑﻬﺎ* از ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ را ﻧﻤ‪ /‬ﺗﻮان ﺣﺬف ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎب‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 123
‫ا ﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮوﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮ* زﻳﺮ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‪ :‬ﺑﺮا* وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪ WAP‬از‬ ‫‪J‬ن اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎز ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ ‪J‬درس اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘ‪/‬‬‫)‪ (URL‬ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺧﻮد را وارد و از ‪J‬ن ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎ ‬ ‫اﺻﻠ‪ /‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮورت ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ “‪”//:http‬‬ ‫ﻧﺪارﻳﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ وب ‪J‬ﻧﺮا ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد اﻧﺠﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ ‪G‬ﻪ ‪J‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻼﺷ‪ /‬ﺑﺮا* اﺗﺼﺎل از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻮ ﻣﺠﺎز‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ‪J‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ذﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﭘﺎك ﻣ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻮ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ* ذﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ در ﻛﻮﻛ‪ /‬را ﭘﺎك ﻣ‪ /‬ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻣﻨﻴﺘ ‬ ‫ﻳ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫ‪ /‬ﻫﺎ * ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺎن داد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫◄ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮز اﻋﺘﺒﺎر* را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ در‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ذﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* راﺣﺘ‪ /‬ﺧﻮد ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ* زﻳﺮ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١.٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ و وﻗﺖ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.١.٩‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢.١.٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY،‬‬ ‫‪) YYYY/MM/DD‬ﺳﺎل ‪ /Y :‬ﻣﺎ ‪ / M :‬روز‪ (D :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣.١.٩‬‬ ‫وﻗﺖ )زﻣﺎن( ﻛﻨﻮﻧ‪ /‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎر* را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ داﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ زﻣﺎن را ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢۴‬و ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣.٩‬‬ ‫] اﻧﺘﺨﺎب [ در ﻣﻨﻮ* ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﻨﻮ*‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ‪ /‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ‪.‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎم دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ* اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داد ﺷﺪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎل‪ :‬ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻮاﺻﻼﺗ‪ /‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺴﺎزد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ :‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎ اﻳﻦ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد در ﺗﻤﺎﻣ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ* اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ‪ /‬و ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.٣.
PAGE 127
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺮ ﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ* ‪G‬ﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫] ﭘﺎﻳﺎن [ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻮاب دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن‬ ‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫] ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن [ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺟﻮاب دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن ﺷﻤﺎر ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ و اﺷﺘﺮاك ﻣﺮﺑﻮط اﺳﺖ(‬ ‫◄‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ را‬ ‫درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺘﻈﺎر )وارد ( را ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺘﻈﺎر راﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.٤.٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﻤﻮدن اﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ*‬ ‫وارد ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﻌﻴﻨ‪ /‬از ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ* ﺗﻠﻔﻨ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎز دارد ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ* زﻳﺮ را‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺧﺮوﺟ ‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮا* ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ* ﺧﺮوﺟ‪./‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻨﻮ* ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﻣﻨﻴﺘ‪ ،/‬ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ* ﭘﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫] اﻧﺘﺨﺎب [ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻋ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫‪) NIP‬ﺷﻤﺎر ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼ‪ /‬اﺳﺖ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮا* ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﻜﺎر ﺑﺮد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ‪ /‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺪ ﻫﺎ* ﺗﻤﺎس را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﺪ اﻣﻨﻴﺘ ‪ PIN ،‬ﻛﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ PIN2‬ﻛﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﺷﺪ اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 130
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(١.١.٥.٩‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻴ‪Q‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ را‬ ‫ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ و ﺑﺮاﻳﺘﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ‪G‬ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘ ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢.١.٥.٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻫﺎ* ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ا* را ‪G‬ﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪G‬ﺎر ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻴ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات اﻳﻦ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ را ﺑﺮا* ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻣ‪Q‬ﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺒ‪Q‬ﻪ دﻳﮕﺮداد ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒ‪.‬ﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٣.١.٥.
PAGE 131
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﻴﺎز‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(٢.٦.٩‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ »در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز« را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪G‬ﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺮوع ﻳﺎ‬ ‫را اﻧﺪاز* ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠ‪Q‬ﺮد* ‪G‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ GPRS‬ﻧﻴﺎز دارد‪ ،‬از اﻳﻦ‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣ‪G /‬ﻨﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗ‪G /‬ﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ* ﺑﻪ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ GPRS‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺠﺪد‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧.٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا* ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪ اﻣﻨﻴﺘ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎز دارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎد را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨.
PAGE 132
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد* ﺑﺮا* ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧﻴﺎز ﺷﺨﺼ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از ‪J‬ﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ ‫ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‪ LG /‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ‪ /‬ﮔﻮﺷ‪ /‬ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮود‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ‪ /‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮا* اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﻋﻤﻠ‪Q‬ﺮد ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ* را ﺑﺮا*‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤ‪Q‬ﻦ ﻣ‪ /‬ﺳﺎزد‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ و‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ‪KG220 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪ +٥٥ :‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ‪ -٠١ :‬درﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮاد‬ ‫‪68‬‬
PAGE 134
PAGE 135
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 KG220 10:40 AM Page 1 USER GUIDE Please read this manual carefully before operating your mobile phone. Retain it for future reference. Disposal of your old appliance 1. When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached to a product it means the product is covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC. 2.
PAGE 136
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.
PAGE 137
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.
PAGE 138
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.
PAGE 139
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 5 Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KG220 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. I n t ro d u c t i o n This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone.
PAGE 140
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 6 Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e 6 Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. ] While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 141
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your phone. There is a risk of this causing a fire. ] Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. ] Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips.
PAGE 142
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 8 Guidelines for safe and efficient use G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e 8 Efficient phone operation Road safety To enjoy optimum performance with minimum power consumption please: Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive. ] ] Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. ] Give full attention to driving. ] Use a hands-free kit, if available.
PAGE 143
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 9 In aircraft Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 144
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 10 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Battery information and care G u i d e l i n es f o r s a f e a n d e f f i c i e n t u s e 10 ] You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery's performance. ] Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life.
PAGE 145
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 11 KG220 features 1. Headset jack Parts of the phone ] Front view Connect a headset here. 2. Up/down side keys Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby mode with the clamshell open. ] Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call. 1. Headset jack 3. Camera lens 2. Up/down side keys Note ] Dirt on the camera lens could affect the image quality. KG 220 f e at u res 3.
PAGE 146
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.
PAGE 147
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 13 1. Earpiece Open view 2, 10. Left soft key/ Right soft key: Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 1. Earpiece 3. Scheduler hot key: Activate the Scheduler menu directly. 8. Navigation keys 4. Send key: Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. You can also quickly access the latest incoming, outgoing and missed calls by pressing the key in standby mode. 9. Confirm key 5.
PAGE 148
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 14 KG220 features 11. Camera key: Press this key to use the camera feature. Directly goes to the camera menu. 12. End/Power key: Used to end a call or reject a call and also to go back to standby mode. Hold this key down to turn the phone on/off. KG 220 f e at u res 14 13. Clear key: Deletes a character by each press. Hold the key down to clear all input. Also use this key to go back to the previous screen. 14.
PAGE 149
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Display information The table below describes various display indicators or icons that appear on the phone’s display screen. On-Screen Icons Icon Description Indicates that the vibration ringer has been set. Indicates the Loud profile is activated. Indicates the Silent profile is activated. Description Indicates the Headset profile is activated. Indicates the strength of the network signal. You can divert a call. Indicates a call is in progress.
PAGE 150
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 16 Getting started Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery. 2. Install the SIM card Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction.
PAGE 151
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 17 3. Install the battery. Charging the battery Insert the bottom of the battery first into the bottom edge of the battery compartment. Push down the top of the battery until it snaps into space. To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery. G ett i n g s ta r te d 1.
PAGE 152
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 18 Getting started Caution ] Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. ] If you use the battery pack charger out of your own country, use an attachment plug adapter for the proper configuration. ] Do not remove your battery or the SIM card while charging. Warning ] Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning Disconnecting the adapter 1.
PAGE 153
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Turning your phone on and off Turning your phone ON 1. Install a battery to the handset and connect the phone to an external power source such as the travel adapter, cigarette lighter adapter or handsfree car kit. Or install a charged battery pack to the handset. 3. Depending on the status of the PIN code request setting you may need to enter your PIN code. Turning your phone OFF 1. Press and hold for a few seconds until the LCD screen is turned off.
PAGE 154
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:40 AM Page 20 Getting started PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) Security code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is required to access functions such as Advice of Call Charge and Fixed dial number. These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card. Check with your network operator for further information. The security code protects the unauthorised use of your phone.
PAGE 155
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 21 General functions Making and answering calls Making an international call Making a call 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the international access code. 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. 2. Enter a phone number, including the area code. ] Press and hold the clear key ( the entire number. ) to call the number. 4. To end the call, press the end key ( right soft key.
PAGE 156
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 22 General functions Adjusting the volume If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a call, use the side keys ( ). Press the up side key to increase and down side key to decrease the volume. Note ] In standby mode with the phone open, pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume. To reject an incoming call, press and hold one of the side keys on the left side of the phone without opening the phone.
PAGE 157
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Entering text You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the phonebook, writing a message, creating a personal greeting. The following text input methods are available in the phone. Page 23 T9 mode This mode lets you enter words with only one keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter.
PAGE 158
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 24 General functions Changing the text input mode 1. When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered, you will notice the text input mode indicator in the top right corner of the LCD screen. G e n e ra l f u n c t i o n s 24 2. Change the text input mode by pressing . You can check the current text input mode in the top right corner of the LCD screen.
PAGE 159
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM 2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes. Page 25 Characters in the order display Key Upper Case Lower Case 3. Complete each word with a space by pressing the key. To delete letters, press . . , / ? ! - : ' '' 1 .
PAGE 160
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 26 General functions ] Using the 123 (Number) mode The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode. Address book G e n e ra l f u n c t i o n s You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names in the memory of your SIM card.
PAGE 161
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM your network supports it. For details of how to activate and deactivate it see Call waiting (Menu 9.3.4) on page 62. If Call waiting is activated, you can put the first call on hold and answer the second, by pressing or by selecting the left soft key[Answer]. Page 27 Switching DTMF tones on during a call To turn DTMF tones on during a call, press the left soft key, and then select DTMF on. DTMF tones can be turned off the same way.
PAGE 162
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 28 General functions Making a second call Displaying callers in a conference call You can make a second call while currently on a call. Enter the second number and press the key. When the second call is connected, the first call is automatically placed on hold. You can swap between calls by pressing the left soft key then selecting Swap.
PAGE 163
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 29 Selecting functions and options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked [ ] and [ ]. Each menu and submenu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function.
PAGE 164
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 30 Menu tree 1. Profiles 5. Messages 3.1 Favorite 5.1 New message 1.2 Loud 3.2 Alarm clock 5.2 Inbox 1.3 Headset 3.3 Voice recorder 5.3 Outbox 1.4 Car 3.4 Calculator 5.4 Draft 1.5 Vibrate only 3.5 Unit converter 5.5 Listen to voice mail 1.6 Silent 3.6 World time 5.6 Info message 3.7 Memory status 5.7 Templates 3.8 Auto answer 5.8 Settings 2. Call register 2.1 Missed calls 2.2 Received calls M e nu t re e 2.3 Dialled calls 3.
PAGE 165
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 7. Downloads 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 31 8. Internet 9. Settings 7.1 Games & apps 8.1 Home 9.1 Date & Time 7.2 Photos 8.2 Bookmarks 9.2 Display settings 7.3 Images 8.3 Go to URL 9.3 Call settings 7.4 Sounds 8.4 Settings 9.4 Security settings 9.5 Network settings 9.6 GPRS setting 9.7 Reset settings 9.
PAGE 166
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 32 Profiles In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are six preset profiles: General, Loud, Headset, Car, Vibrate only and Silent. Each profile can be personalised(Except Vibrate only, Silent menu). Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using left/right navigation keys. Changing the profile P ro f i l es 2.
PAGE 167
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM ] Effect sound volume: Set the volume of effect sound. ] Power on/off volume: Set the volume of the ring tone when switching the phone on/off. Customising profiles – Rename Page 33 Menu 1.X.3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. Note ] V i b r a t e o n l y , H e a d s e t and C a r(and Silent)profiles cannot be renamed. 2. Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key [OK]. P ro f i l es 1.
PAGE 168
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 34 Call register You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times. Missed calls Menu 2.1 This option lets you view the last 10 unanswered calls.
PAGE 169
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 All calls 10:41 AM Menu 2.4 You can view all lists of outgoing or incoming calls. Delete recent call Call duration ] Dialled calls: Length of the outgoing calls. ] Reset all: Resets the call timer. Call costs Menu 2.5 Use this to delete the missed call list, received call list, or dialled call list. You can also delete all call lists at one time selecting All calls. Call charges Page 35 (Menu 2.6.
PAGE 170
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 36 Call register ] ] Set credit: This network service allows you to limit the cost of your calls by selected charging units. If you select Read, the number of remaining units are shown. If you select Change, you can change your charge limit. Auto display: This network service allows you to automatically see the cost of your last calls. If set to On, you can see the cost of the last call when the call is released. GPRS information Menu 2.
PAGE 171
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 37 Tools Favorite Menu 3.1 This option allows you to add your own favourites to the list already provided. Once you create your own menu, you can access the desired function quickly in the idle screen by pressing the up navigation key. Alarm clock Menu 3.2 You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period : Once, Mon ~ Fri, Mon ~ Sat, Everyday. 4.
PAGE 172
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 38 Tools Unit converter Menu 3.5 This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 4 types that can be converted into units: Length, Area, Weight, and Volume. 1. Select one of four unit types by pressing the left soft key [Unit]. 2. In the Current unit section select the unit you want to convert using the left/right navigation keys. 3. Move to the Convert unit section by pressing the down navigation key. 4.
PAGE 173
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 General Menu 10:41 AM (Menu 3.8.2) You can adjust the answering phone mode as General. Meeting Menu (Menu 3.8.3) You can adjust the answering phone mode as Meeting. Driving Menu (Menu 3.8.4) You can adjust the answering phone mode as Driving. User defined 1, 2 Menu (Menu 6.8.5/6) You can personalize answering phone mode, as you want by recording your voice. Recorded messages You can check recorded messages. (Menu 3.8.7) Page 39 Ringing time (Menu 3.8.
PAGE 174
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 40 Organiser O rg a n i s e r Contacts Menu 4.1 You can save phone numbers and their corresponding names in the memory of your SIM card. In addition, you can save up to 500 numbers and names in the phone memory. Press the left soft key [Menu] in standby mode, then select Contacts. Search (Menu 4.1.1) 1. Select Search. You are asked to enter a name. 2. Enter the start of the name that you wish to find and press the left soft key [Search].
PAGE 175
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 ] 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Adding new entries into the phone memory: You can enter a name, and number, and select the required group. And select which number will be the main number. Caller groups (Menu 4.1.3) Page 41 ] Add member: Add a member to the group. You can add up to 20 members per group. ] Remove member: Removes the member from the group member list. The contact entry still remains in Contacts. ] Rename: Assigns a new name to the group.
PAGE 176
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 42 Organiser Settings (Menu 4.1.5) Set memory You can select the memory for the Contacts feature between the SIM and the phone. If you select Variable, when adding entry, the phone will ask where to save the number. Search by You can set the phone to search by name or number, when you search Contacts. If you select Variable, the phone will ask how to search when you search Contacts. View options You can set the Contact display option.
PAGE 177
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Information ] (Menu 4.1.8) Service dial number (SIM dependent): Use this to view the list of Service Dialling Numbers (SDN) assigned by your network operator (if supported by the SIM card). Such numbers include the emergency, directory enquiries and voice mail numbers. 1. Select the Service dial number option. 2. The names of the available services will be shown. Page 43 Scheduler Menu 4.2 When you enter this menu, a calendar appears.
PAGE 178
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 44 Organiser ] View: Shows the schedule note or memo for the chosen day. Press the left soft key [Options] to edit or delete the note you selected. ] View all: Shows all the notes that are entered in the phone. Use the up/down navigation keys to browse through the note lists. ] Delete past: Select this to delete the expired schedule notes that you have already been notified of. ] Delete all: Select this to delete all the schedule notes and memos.
PAGE 179
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 6:23 PM Page 45 Messages This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. Sending of SMS and MMS leads to costs. For details please contact your network operator. New message Write text message Menu 5.1 (Menu 5.1.1) You can write and edit text messages up to 10 pages. 1. Enter the Messages menu by pressing [Select]. 2.
PAGE 180
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 46 All messages will automatically be saved in the outbox folder, even after a sending failure. ] Save: Stores messages in the Drafts folder. ] Font: You can select the Size and Style of font. ] Colour: You can also set the Colour of the text (foreground) and the background. ] Alignment: You can select the alignment of text. ] Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own words. This menu will only be shown when the edit mode has been set to abc/ABC/123.
PAGE 181
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 ] ] 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Move to slide: You can move to previous or next slide. Delete slide: You can delete the current slide. ] Set slide format - Set timer: You can set timer for slide, text, picture and sound. - Swap text and picture: You can switch the position of picture and text of the message. ] ] Remove media: You can remove pictures or sounds in the slide. This option can be shown only when any media exists. Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word.
PAGE 182
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 48 Messages Note ] Replay (applicable to Multimedia message only): You can replay multimedia messages. ] Receive (In the case of notification message): If Multimedia message is set to Auto download off, you can get only Notification. To receive a message, you need to select [Receive]. ] S I M m e s s a g e : SIM message means the message is exceptionally stored in the SIM card.
PAGE 183
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 49 message), the date and time when you sent it, message type and size, the priority (only for multimedia message), and recipients. The messages of which transmission was completed has the following options. ] View: You can view the selected message. ] Forward: You can forward the selected message to other recipients. ] Delete: Deletes the selected message from outbox.
PAGE 184
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 50 Messages ] ] Information: You can view the information of selected message: subject (only for multimedia message), the date and time when saved, message type and size, the priority (only for multimedia message). Delete all: Deletes all the messages from drafts folder. Listen to voice mail Menu 5.5 This menu provides you with a quick way of accessing your voice mailbox (if provided by your network).
PAGE 185
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 ] ] 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 51 View list: You can see Info service message numbers which you have added. If you press [Options], you can edit and delete info message categories which you have added. • Top urgent. Please contact. Active list: You can select Info service message numbers in the active list. If you activate an info service number, you can receive messages sent from the number. ] View: Select this to view the selected template.
PAGE 186
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 52 Messages ] View: You can view the multimedia template. ] Edit: You can edit the multimedia template. ] Add new: Allows you to add a new multimedia template. Text message ] Menu 5.8 (Menu 5.8.1) Message types: ] Write messages: You can write a multimedia message with the multimedia template. Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, X.400, Email, ERMES ] Delete: Deletes the selected template message from the multimedia template list.
PAGE 187
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 Multimedia message 10:41 AM (Menu 5.8.2) ] Priority: You can send the message after setting the level of priority: Low, Normal and High. ] Validity period: This network service allows you to set how long your text messages will be stored at the message centre. ] Delivery report: If it is set to Yes in this menu, you can check whether your message is sent successfully. ] Auto download On: The messages are downloaded automatically on receipt.
PAGE 188
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 54 Messages Info message (Menu 5.8.4) (Dependent to network and subscription) ] Receive - Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. - No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. ] Alert - Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. - No: Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages.
PAGE 189
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 55 Camera Menu 6.1 Press the Menu key and select Camera > Take a picture using the navigation keys. Or you can directly open the camera module by a press of the Camera key in standby mode. The camera module opens and you’ll see the view to be captured. preview option menu bar 5. Memory ( status. Note ] If the memory is full, “Memory full” message is popped up and you cannot save a photo. Create space by deleting old photos in Photo album. 6.
PAGE 190
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 56 Camera picture message Save After taking a photo in 48x48 (Address book), you can directly save the image in the address book by selecting “ ”. Delete Take continuously Note ] When the resolution is set to 48x48 (Address book), the following menu bar appears. Address book entry Save Menu 6.2 You can take the maximum of 9 pictures subsequently at the same time. After taking a picture, you can view it using the up/down navigation keys.
PAGE 191
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 57 Downloads Games & apps Menu 7.1 Profiles (Menu 7.1.2) You can access a great selection of games on your phone. These games are different to the downloadable games as you require you to be connected while you are playing. This menu contains the same settings of the Internet menu. In fact, in order to download new applications, a WAP connection is needed. Note Photos ] After downloading any Java game, press “Ok” Key( ) to save it in the root folder.
PAGE 192
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 58 Downloads ] Protection: You can lock the picture for deleting in mistakes in this menu. Images Menu 7.3 You can send the message with a image, and set it as a wallpaper. Sounds Menu 7.4 You can send the message with a sound, and set it as a ring tone.
PAGE 193
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 59 Internet Home Menu 8.1 Connect to a homepage. The homepage may be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by Service Provider if you don’t make in activated profile. Bookmarks Menu 8.2 This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite web pages for easy access at a later time. Your phone has several pre-installed bookmarks. These preinstalled bookmarks cannot be deleted. ] ] Connect: Connects to the selected bookmark.
PAGE 194
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 60 Internet Each profile has submenus as follows: I n te r n et ] Activate: Activates the selected profile. ] Settings: Use this to edit and change WAP settings for the selected profile. - Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the address (URL) of a site you want to use as homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the front of each URL as the WAP Browser will automatically add it. - Bearer: You can set the bearer data service.
PAGE 195
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM ] Personal: You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone. ] Rename: You can change the profile name. Reset profiles ] Add new: You can add a new profile. You can reset profiles to its default configuration. ] Delete: You can delete the profile.
PAGE 196
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 62 Settings S ett i n g s You can set the following menus for your convenience and preferences. Date & Time Display settings Menu 9.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date Many features of your phone can be customised to suit your preferences. All of these features are accessed via the Phone settings menu. ] Wallpaper: Use this to set up the display on the LCD screen in standby mode.
PAGE 197
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 ] 2006.6.13 10:41 AM ] Menu colour: Your phone provides you with 4 menu colour themes. Set the menu colour by scrolling and pressing the left soft key [Select]. ] Network name: If you select on, you can see the network service provider name which is displayed in standby mode. Call settings If no reply: Diverts voice calls which you do not answer. ] If out of reach: Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverage.
PAGE 198
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 64 Settings ] View status: View the status of the corresponding service. S ett i n g s Answer mode ] (Menu 9.3.2) Flip open If you select this menu, you can receive an incoming call when only opening the flip. ] Any key If you select this menu, you can receive a call by pressing any key except [End] key. ] Send key only If you select this menu, you can receive a call by only pressing [Send] key. Send my number (Menu 9.3.
PAGE 199
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 Security settings Menu 9.4 (Menu 9.4.1) In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press [Select]. 2. Set Enable/Disable. 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. 4.
PAGE 200
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 66 Settings S ett i n g s ] All incoming The barring service for all incoming calls. Fixed dial number ] Incoming when abroad The barring service for all incoming calls when roaming. You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. ] Cancel all You can cancel all barring services. ] ] Change password You can change the password for Call Barring Service.
PAGE 201
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM 2. Input new Security code/PIN2 code and verify them. Network settings Menu 9.5 The Network settings feature enables you to indicate whether the network used when roaming(outside your home area) is selected automatically, manually or preferably. Note ] You can select a network other than your home network only if it has a valid roaming agreement with your home network. Network selection Automatic (Menu 9.5.1) Manual ] (Menu 9.5.1.
PAGE 202
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 68 Settings Band selection S ett i n g s EGSM/DCS (Menu 9.5.2) (Menu 9.5.2.1) According to depending on Network situation, you can select EGSM/DCS. PCS only (Menu 9.6.1) If you select Power on and you are in a network that supports GPRS, the phone registers to the GPRS network and sending short messages will be done via GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data connection, for example, to send and receive a multimedia message is quicker.
PAGE 203
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.13 10:41 AM Page 69 Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Battery Note may invalidate your warranty. ] Accessories may be different in different regions; please check with our regional service company or agent for further enquiries. Headset Ac c es s o r i es ] Always use genuine LG accessories. Failure to do this Allows hands-free operation.
PAGE 204
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.
PAGE 205
KG220 UAE(eng)_0613 2006.6.